Home

2009 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT8 Owners Manual

1. Cav Cartridge Mini Description Cav Cartridge Mini Description ity Fuse Fuse P ity Fuse Fuse P 10 Spare 19 40 Amp JB Power 11 40Amp HVAC Blower Green Green 20 30 Amp Wiper Motor 12 30 Amp Rear Wiper Ign R O Pink Pink 21 20Amp Fuel Pump 13 40 Amp Rear Window Defroster Yellow Green EBL Heated Mirror 22 20Amp TCM A C Clutch 14 30Amp Rear HVAC If Yellow Pink Equipped 23 25 Amp Power Inverter 15 Spare Natural 16 50 Amp ASD 24 20Amp Rear Heated Seats Red Yellow 17 30 Amp ABS Pump 25 20 Amp Final Drive Control Pink Yellow Module FDCM 18 40 Amp Accessory Delay Seats 26 15Amp Brake Lamps Green Blue 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Cav Cartridge Mini Description Cav Cartridge Mini Description ity Fuse Fuse P ity Fuse Fuse P 27 20Amp HD Washer If 36 Spare Yellow Equipped Export 37 20Amp Ignition Switch Only Yellow 28 30 Amp _ ABS Valves 38 20Amp HID Left Green Yellow 29 20Amp PCM Batt Gasoline 39 20Amp HID Right Yellow Only Yellow 30 Spare 40 25 Amp Next Generation Con 31 Spare Natural troller NGC Injectors 32 15 Amp Powertrain Control 41 20 Amp Subwoofer SRT Only Blue Module Diesel Only Yellow 33 20 Amp Final Drive Control 42 Spare Yellow Module FDCM E Diff 43 25 Amp Coils Actuators 34 Spare Na
2. 0000 279 Remote 2293 e cerpat a PERCY GE 25 Steering Power 432 INDEX ee Tilt Col mn eR IDE Dep PEE 140 Wheel Tilt 222 Rs mex ee 140 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls i 99 tk Sr RERO RR Ron 261 DLOLASC a eas dee ORE K RC mal ae AA S 380 Storage Behind the Seat 0 165 Storage BIN 426g xo he ac dora ae ede aS 165 Storage Compartment Center Seat 123 Storage Vehicle 6405 0 eee RES 271 380 Storing Your Vehicle 00000050 380 S n ROOK su d deat Seiad EORR AS Gee DUE beats 158 Sunglasses Storage llle 151 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 46 Sway Control Trailer 1 0 0 0 0 299 System Remote Starting 00 0 25 Tachometer 39 b sues REREDSES 181 Telescoping Steering Column 140 Temperature Control Automatic ATC Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 183 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 63 Theft System Arming llle 18 Theft System Disarming llle 19 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 0 20 00 0 cea 167 Tilt Steering Column 000050 140 Time Delay Headlight 0 135 Tire and Loading Information Placard 306 Tire Identification Number TIN 305 Tir Markings ce races x x Dex eem he 301 Tire Safety Information 06 301 me 71 310 414 Air Pressute a4 oe sadag ciar Red LEY ES 3
3. 291 294 Anti Lock Warning Light llus 180 Anti Theft Syst m seeds sadisti eee 181 Appearance Cafe sece sece rirenese ees 368 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance TOWING sese px yx e e s 96 Auto Down Power Windows sss 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror s 78 Automatic Door Locks llle 28 Automatic Headlights 129 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 263 Automatic Transmission 0 283 367 Fluid Level Check 0 000 0004 367 AUtOSUCK ode alee cera ge ud eee uA a 285 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 160 Auxiliary Power Outlet 0 160 Battery ise g aandae a i UR ee os FRR es 355 Emergency Starting llle 341 NENNEN INDEX 419 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 Saving Feature Protection 132 Belts Seat dae RE nee acd ea 37 Body Mechanism Lubrication 357 B Pillar Location lle 306 Brake Assist System 0 00000 eee 295 Brake Control System Electronic 294 Brake System ecce ed m nh ee 366 Anti Lock ABS 0000000 ee 291 294 Fid Check 04 42 46 Hie eed eder bankers 366 Master Cylinder s4 ar atiucaiane dore ndeama disas 366 Parking cit to id cet eed ede Edad ns 289 Warning Light 0 0 0000 179 Brake Transmission Interlock 281 Break In R
4. 145 Rear Park Assist Warning Display 146 Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist SyStem i Pee Gees ba ae ha a ae 148 Service The Rear Park Assist System 148 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 149 ll Rear Camera If Equipped 149 Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off 149 E Overhead Console lille 150 Courtesy Reading Lights 151 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Sunglasses Storage ased ssa res tats s 151 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 151 Programming HomeLink 153 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 155 Using HomeLink s 156 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink BURON MN RS 156 DOCULIEY PEN 156 Troubleshooting Tips 157 General Information 157 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 158 Opening Sunroof Express 159 Closing Sunroof Express 159 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 Pinch Protect Featur iudesoxeur ue Red 159 WCupholders css zu ceo XVI Hr SE Ya Ea 164 Pinch Protect Override 159 W Cargo Area Features exea eee ad Rn 164 Venting Sunroof Express 159 Cargo Light isa 6 teres POR eg pist 164 Sunshade Operatio
5. 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The UConnect system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Voi
6. e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 102 UNDERSTANDING
7. lll Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped suse be Ge desea ik boa ade oak 81 Operation seos seein o Gee ede gea 83 Phone Call Features 91 UConnect System Features 94 Advanced Phone Connectivity 99 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System cererea nasasa ii 101 General Information aaa aaa aaa 109 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se H Voice Recognition System VR Rear Heated Seats If Equipped 119 M ME ne 60 40 Split Rear Seat 20 0 0 00 121 Voice Recognition System VR Operation 109 Bl Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 123 Commands o rnm Ross 111 Setting Memory Positions And Linking Voice Training sus asas ede dc o Aig ales 114 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To ro e 114 PE PARE TSH eee a pe oats ad Front Manual Seat Adjustment 114 Memory Position Recall 125 Front Seat Adjustment Recline 115 Ne Soe nae adi 126 Manual DUDACORDDONRSORISUSIE sedie ue Easy Entry Exit Seat 0 000 127 Eight Way Driver s Power Seat 116 Bl To Open And Close The Hood 128 de MU QI 128 Head Restraints EM 117 Multifunction Lever erssress serenitas 128 Headlights And Parking Lights 129 Front Heated Seat
8. Replacement Tires 00050 316 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 324 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 317 6 Adding Fuel erae 0a canter k ead date 325 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 317 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 325 Premium System llle 317 B Trailer Towing 0 0 0000 328 General Information 6 320 Common Towing Definitions H Fuel Requirements 4 504 6 veo eed peeve ees 321 Trailer Hitch Classification GL BNSING 4a xem ELAS 321 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Reformulated Gasoline 321 WENO RAMMED wake ahaa gian edadile Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 321 TENT Gon Te Tn pea deque E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 322 Towing Requirements sess 333 MMT In Gasoline nonoa aannaaien 323 TOWIBEGHS dun tiis A dead aoe Materials Added To Fuel 000000 gy Mkeo D Towne Behind Motorhome Etc 337 Fuel System Cautions 323 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by STARTING PROCEDURE Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts
9. To Unlock the Vehicle s Doors To unlock the vehicle s door s grasp the door handle and the door s will unlock NOTE e f the vehicle has not been used for 72 hours or it has been raining for 24 hours you may have to pull a door handle to reactivate this feature If the vehicle s door locks are programmed to Unlock Driver s Door 1st Press only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door handle is grasped If the vehicle s door locks are programmed to Unlock AII Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock if any door handle is grasped Refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e If you accidentally lock your RKE transmitter in the vehicle using the door panel switch ALL doors will unlock and the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed If you do this three times the system will not chirp and the doors will remain locked on the 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se third attempt To re enable the system the vehicle must be unlocked with another valid RKE transmitter To Lock the Vehicle s Doors The vehicle doors can be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel To Place an RKE Transmitter in the Vehicle for Safekeeping Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Go only If you want to lock an
10. WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in keyless Go If Equipped This function allows the driver to op erate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START STOP button is installed and the Keyless Go ignition key FOBIK 050105205 CAN be detected inside of the vehicle inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the ex haust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Removing and Re Installing the Engine Start Stop Button The ENGINE START STOP button may be removed from the receptacle to allow the vehicle ignition to be controlled conventionally by inserting the FOBIK The button may be removed using the valet key from the FOBIK as a thin tool Insert the metal part of the valet key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose To reinstall the button position it with its letteri
11. 194 Keyless Go Display If Equipped 197 Compass Display 0 Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped 4 4 2 aa 200 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 28 ee pe ede ede 200 System Status sese en 205 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack sts dots a cere aed tester TIG do EMIETT POPE 206 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 207 174 Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play E AM FM CD DVD Multimedia System Radio RER REN If Equipped issues Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure 215 ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 0 00 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode lll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD M
12. 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating
13. 9 20 Amp Pwr Outlet B 13 10 Amp Autowipe R A Yellow Red ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Cave Cartridge viini Fuse Description Cavs Cartridge wini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 14 20 Amp Cigar Ltr R A 21 Spare Yellow Acc De 15 10 Amp Tire Pressure Tran lay Red sponders R O 22 15Amp Rear Wiper B 16 10Amp Upper amp Lower Blue Red Switch Bank Diag 24 10 Amp Power Distribution Connector Cluster Red Center PDC Relays B Powertrain Control 17 15 Amp Flipper Glass B Module A580 R S Blue 25 10 Amp Shifter Assy BTSI 19 Spare Red Trans Case Switch R S ESP ABS Trailer 20 10 Amp Steering Column Con AWAY Damp Belay Red trol Module SCCM Cluster R S BUX Trailer Tow 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Cave Cartridge Mini 5 Description ity Fuse Fuse 2 40 Amp HID Headlamps Green 3 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 Diesel Red Only 4 30 Amp Power Outlets Pink 5 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 Diesel Red Only 6 30 Amp Cig Lighter Trail Tow Pink Batt Power Distribution Center pus A Com Cav Cartridge Mini Description 8 40 Amp Starter JB Power ity Fuse Fuse Green 1 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 Diesel 9 20 Amp Front Power Windows Red Only Blue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
14. The rain sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the rain sensing system will not Emm wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sense feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the rain sensing system will not oper ate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located b
15. will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recomm
16. Automatic Transmission 367 Appearance Care And Protection From COFPOSION 3 uoce de ac RR aA RETRO S 368 a Fuses 2o RERO RE 373 Interior Fuses 200 0002 ee 373 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center iss fd Ede yak ERES 376 Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module 0 0 0 e eee ee eee 379 B Vehicle Storage sess 380 H Replacement Bulbs sess 381 H Bulb Replacement ces e Rm IR 382 High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID If Equipped Headlight eee ee emn Front Turn Signal Front Fog Light Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lights Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL lll Fluid Capacities Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 386 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 1L ae 5 071606045 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 2 Power Distribution Center 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 11 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic tr
17. CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible WARNING e Do not tow when the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Failure to follow this could result in loss of control and serious injury e Tailpipes may be hot and you could be seriously injured if you come into contact with the tailpipes To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight
18. Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW
19. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Pre
20. courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights The mul tifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Headlights and Parking Lights Automatic Headlight System If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for to activate the automatic headlight system headlight operation Turn to the third detent for AUTO headlight operation if equipped This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi tion the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off 031406004 Headlight Switch 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in t
21. detent above the dimmer range Rotating the control to the second detent above the dimmer range turns the interior lights on Rotating the control to the Off extreme bottom position disables all the interior lights even when the doors and liftgate are open While in the Off position the instrument panel lighting is at the lowest light level and may not be suitable for night driving Dimmer Control Battery Saver Feature If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position parking light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes Normal A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK ACC a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever To activate the fog lights turn on the park turn lights low beam headlights or Auto head lights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights Front Fog Light Control are on 031406006 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
22. detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system 324 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mal functions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which c
23. es STARTING AND OPERATING 337 performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the proper maintenance intervals Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing is not allowed WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS H Hazard Warning Flashers 340 Jump Starting RR RR 341 H if Your Engine Overheats 340 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is l
24. ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Auto Door Locks under Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature Only Available if Auto Lock is Enabled This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Auto Unlock on Exit under Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Passive Entry System If Equipped The Passive Entry system allows you to unlock the vehicle s door s without using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter unlock button or the unlock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel To use this feature you must have a valid RKE transmitter within 3 ft 0 9 m of the door handle you desire to use and it must be located outside of the vehicle
25. inside of the vehicle and without the brake pedal pressed press the START STOP button once to go to the ACC position or twice to go to the ON position Then press the pink colored tab through the access port with a small flat bladed screwdriver or alike While pressing the override tab move the shift lever out of the PARK position When complete return the override cover to its original position 5 Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be de
26. life of the battery is a minimum of three years ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Liftgate closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec will honk twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and To Enter Remote Start Mode onds The parking lights will flash and the horn Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if so equipped are disable
27. pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For seat belts having an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the Always remove the subwoofer from the ve
28. Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Electronic Roll Mitigation 348 Electronic Stability Program 297 Traction Control System 00 294 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 296 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 142 Electronic Stability Program ESP 297 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 186 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ej radon ee ts eed eae Dhaene d 184 187 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 285 Hazard Warning Flasher 340 JUMP Starting eine eddy rue LER 341 Emission Control System Maintenance 349 392 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Break In Recommendations Checking Oil Level Compartment Compartment Identification 422 INDEX BEEN Coolant Antifreeze leeren 361 COOLE uostri done Fuse vg Gan oe eat a Ga 361 Exhaust Gas Caution 00005 69 324 Fails to Start scies e m es 279 Elooded Starting RR Rm 279 Fuel Requirements 0 321 387 b io sae waits ta anges eau E ER bee 352 387 Oil Change Interval iei iex 352 Oil Selection sees 353 387 Overheating soarte k ressega i eani 340 Stattin ulus a vag ERE da ERR RH deas d 276 Temperature Gauge s o crescere 0 00 eee 183 Engine Oil Viscosity 6 6 0 00 eee eee ee 353 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 0 353 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 55 Entry S
29. Battery Access Door 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place If Equipped With Passive Entry 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected
30. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this s
31. Diagnostic System 348 349 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 151 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Outside Rearview Mirrors 206 79 Overhead Console 0 000000 eee 150 Overheating Engine 200 184 340 Owner s Manual Operator Manual Paint Cates vue cree eee ie ee aie es 368 Paint Damage 0 cece 368 Panic Alati ate os neo ene e RR 22 Park Sense System Rear 00006 145 Parking Brake isea tese csee seri RR RR S 289 Passing Light oes se roce Rx e eer eme 135 Pedals Adjustable issuer emn 14 Personal Set ngS amp 22 s RR nirs 200 Pets hone cae oad cR RR AR RARE RU dcr 68 Pets Transporting 2 2 e e mes 68 Phone Cellular esee 81 Phone Hands Free UConnect 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 306 Polishing and Waxing 0050 369 Power Distribution Center Fuses 376 Door Locks bee eee I eae 28 Inverter zoe cedet bee ee d oed Ae E a has 162 IMIFTOES 2usngsatgenduig Sea inca der ida ase des Gedo 79 NENNEN INDEX 429 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 160 Sets iiserees HF Soe ES OER eS 116 117 Steering esses br ee dad saan a 288 289 S nfOOf 2ilesdu Ru pues b ode eoi ans 158 WINGOWS ace scene p R OE NUR RR 31 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 Pretensioners Seat Belisce ci cede pev er RTT aie 44 Progr
32. GO 4 o esce oth eee dete ba ae etn 12 276 Keys 2c bev bia dota gad as efa eae ae ive 12 Kicker Sound System 0 00 00 e eee 256 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 37 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 63 64 Lead Free Gasoline llle 321 Leaks Fluid lees 7 Life of Tires evista cem cR a CHER es 315 Liftgate ce sss oa er Ee dyes 34 Liftgate Flipper Glass llle 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer Light s 2er age ars Ehe 71 128 Anti Lock Automatic Headlights less Back Up act oe ei eres es tesa ek tee ed Battery Saver Brake Assist Warning Brake Warning Bulb Replacement ais aue nisa datne ua ma eaa Cargo Center Mounted Stop Cruise s pesso cga asd ea REG REA TOR E xs Daytime Running sosea nata eaae s na eee Dimmer Switch Headlight 420 INDEX ae Electronic Stability Program ESP Reading cmm e dre 136 151 Indicator ee pe iaae i 181 185 300 Rear Servicing 0000 385 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 186 Rear al 2isa diag ce aged err Rx REY 385 Fog 2R6yaneerdonebS deba regere d 133 186 384 Seat Belt Reminder less 185 n Pr 373 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 181 Hazard Warning Flasher 340 DCIVICE 4 2 esi es IIR rea 9 Ae E Peg Ee Re ped 382 Headlight Switch esses Ree 129 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 180 Headlights 1 22 se me e ers 382 Side Marker ssc 0
33. Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the system you will need to press the UN LOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tam pering The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the system You may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not
34. RKE transmitter in your vehicle by using the door panel switch perform the following pro cedure 1 With the desired RKE transmitter in the vehicle press the door lock switch located on the door panel All doors will lock When all doors are closed you will hear three chirps of the horn and the doors will unlock This is the same lock unlock and chirping sound that you would experience if you accidentally locked your RKE transmit ter in the vehicle 2 Open the door and repeat Step 1 two more times three times total The doors will remain locked no audible warnings will occur NOTE Any RKE transmitter that is locked in the vehicle either by a passive lock another RKE lock or the door panel lock switch will be disabled from Keyless Go The disabled RKE transmitter s will be re enabled after a passive unlock or RKE unlock Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s PEE door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when
35. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Lin
36. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Defrosters Check operation by selecting the DEFROST mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B Mirrors e n RR Automatic Dimming Mirror Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Driver s And Front Passenger Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Power Outside Mirrors Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped
37. To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the UConnect for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Blueto
38. VR hard key You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Nam
39. WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right front passenger and window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbags to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING e n a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not prop erly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING Continued This feature allows the shoulder par
40. Y or NO N appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors Ist Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which handle is grasped If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M only result in the driver s door opening You have to touch a passenger handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver s Door Only is programmed in the EVIC Sound Horn with Lock When YES Y is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
41. Y or NO N appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When YES Y is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears When NO N is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Service Interval When this feature is selected a service interval between 2 000 3 200 km and 6 000 mi 10 000 km in 500 mi 800 km increments may be selected Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select distances between 2 000 3 200 km and 6 000 mi 10 000 km in 500 mi 800 km increments Reset Service Distance Displays Only if Service Interval was Changed When this feature is selected the current accumulated service distance can be reset to the newly selected service interval Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until YES Y or NO N appears 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES
42. a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con tract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manu facturer s service contract If you purchased a service con tract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty expires please refer to the contract docu ments and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with the
43. a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solut
44. allow a downshift if the down shift would result in a engine overspeed condition The transmission will always allow a upshift from 1st to 2nd gear however 2nd 3rd 3rd 4th and 4th 5th upshifts will not be allowed if the vehicle speed is to low to maintain operation in the selected gear The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated When in the Autostick mode as the engine RPM nears the engine maximum speed an UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of your instrument cluster This message appears in order to alert the driver that the engine speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 is approaching it s maximum value and a upshift to the next gear is required In the event that the driver does not upshift the engine control system will automatically do it for the driver Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Shifting into or out of the Autostick mode can be done at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When the driver wishes to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the left or right D D position while in DRIVE Hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second to disengage Autostick The transmi
45. arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 66 ft 20 m using a handheld RKE radio transmit ter The RKE transmitter does not need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining trans mitters will continue to work Driving the vehicle over 5 mph disables all transmitter buttons for all Fobs until the ignition is turned back to Off Lock 81bb182d Three Button FOBIK To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting procee
46. beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR hard key and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard key 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different then the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the
47. between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary Tune S
48. by the engineers who designed your vehicle 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines NOTE Fill engine oil one quart at a time CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine e Operating the engine with the oil levels below the safe zone or operating with oil levels that exceed the top of the safe zone may cause engine damage Change Engine Oil Refer to t
49. cause an electric shock and failure Rear Power Outlet The rear power outlet is a direct feed from the battery and will receive power whether the ignition is in the ON or LOCK position All accessories connected to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw the back of the center console to convert DC current to power from the vehicle s battery even when not in AC current This outlet can be used to power small use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if appliances and electronics plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power Inverter es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Press the power inverter switch located on the upper the inverter status indica
50. check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 24 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 3 U S Gallons 8 7 Liters this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Electronic Vehicle Information Center 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The EVIC consists of the following System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Surround Sound Modes If Equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS Performance Pages if equipped The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed wil
51. compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio
52. core to act JUMP STARTING as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may from the engine cooling system be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be CAUTION dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage carefully your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT WARNING H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle S e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Do not lean over a battery when attaching with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water Continued 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued e A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes e Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e Do not use a 24 Volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might ma
53. edited Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system
54. fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specifica tions may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an acci dent Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching on fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating condi tions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to accurately adjust the fluid level Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from
55. for addi tional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Trailer Hitch Classification AII trailer hitches should be professionally installed on Class Max GTW your vehicle Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine GCWR Gross Combined Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Tongue Transmission Wt Rating Trailer Wt Wt See Note 6 1L Automatic 8 800 Ibs 3 992 kg 35 sq ft 3 25 sq m 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and car
56. help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up See Owner s Manual For Further Information S0bfeofo Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury
57. ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door with the integrated ignition key in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE tran
58. in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door Hood Release Handle 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood NOTE To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals headlight beam selection instru ment panel light dimming passing light interior
59. in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release memory button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release memory button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memor
60. in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints in this section 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided
61. installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower at tachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regard less of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If
62. is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System provides visible and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations The Rear Park Assist System
63. is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the lever towards you or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control
64. is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the re cliner only when the vehicle is parked Continued 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver s seat all models and on the left side of the passenger s seat if equipped Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or de creases the lumbar support Eight Way Driver s Power Seat The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Manual Lumbar Control Power Seat S
65. low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 13 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera WARNING ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or exceed the upper limits of
66. manner 410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or
67. memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be
68. oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines 3904 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN CAUTION Required Maintenance Interval
69. optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Heated Power Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defrost Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Lighted Vanity Mirror HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones
70. passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor 9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 418 INDEX NENNEN ABS Anti Lock Brake System 180 291 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 363 Adding Fuel s 03 02s oto cans en 325 Additives Fuel 2 0 0 00 00 cee eee 323 Adjustable Pedals d seem em 141 Air Conditioner Maintenance 356 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 270 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 356 Air Pressure Tires llle 312 Airbag 2e ew Ra Sok Ae eiu EAR 46 Airbag Deployment speme tas smenada sanas 53 Airbag Light gt see ciereiiseie n eden ead 56 70 180 Airbag Maintenance 0 0 0 0 0000s eee 55 Alarm P nie secara sacha a ela ek nea EYE 22 Alarm Security Alarm 40 18 181 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 0000 253 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 362 387 Disposal 5 sax dv G SS wh dub E Reg 364 Anti Lock Brake System ABS
71. refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult
72. should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the
73. storage for sunglasses and optional power sunroof switches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push the finger depression on the overhead console to open Push the finger depression to close GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead WARNING console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver
74. the EVIC until you push the START Button ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 n Off the Engine While in Remote Start WARNING Press and release the REMOTE START button one time e For personal security and safety in the event of an NOTE To avoid inadvertent shutdowns the system accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START well as when you park end leave the vehicle button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote When leaving the vehicle always remove the key Start request from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with DOOR LOCKS access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in juries and death Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
75. the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or Power Sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034105984 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sun
76. the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language no
77. the normal operating range others could be badly burned by steam or boiling cautions coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer CAUTION ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter later in this section ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 15 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously wi
78. time when in Automatic operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the Recirculation button How ever under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recircu lation mode you must first move your mode knob to Panel Panel Floor or Floor then press the Recircu lation button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature Control and Manual This means the customer can override the blower mode and disable the Automatic Temperature Control completely NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start opera tion if the blower control is left in the O Off position Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op eration Chart below for details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The System will Mode Air Temperature Air Recirculation A C Operation How Blo
79. time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time To clear the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 30 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8 mile 1 4 mile e The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when co
80. to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle ag reed eR pena UR e RR RR 409 Speech Impaired TDD TIY 411 Prepare For The Appointment 409 Service Contract cee es 411 Prepare A List iees nee edo ad oy e 409 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 412 Be Reasonable With Requests 40 BMOPAR Parts 000000 412 H If You Need Assistance lesse 409 W Reporting Safety Defects 412 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 410 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 410 Diea tian decer uet aa He 9 In Mexico Contact 410 m Canada secre eseete seem begets ae 408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Wi Publication Order Forms 413 Traction Grades sss eee e 415 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades sess 415 Quality Grades lille 414 Treadwear eee 415 E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to hav
81. under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Control ORC e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How the Airbag System Works Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC determines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of
82. when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is upper right side of the instrument panel Do not driven modify the front bumper or vehicle body struc ture You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the 2 5 to 8 seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the 2 5 to 8 second interval or e Flickers or comes on and remains on for any period of time while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine rel
83. will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If the Rear Park Assist System is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi mately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist Sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 59 in 30 to 150 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Park Assist Warning Display When the ignition is turned to the ON position the The Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about headliner near the flipper glass provides both visible and one second Each side of the warning display has six audible warnings to indicate the distance between the yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the rear fascia and the detected obstacle obstacle when the red LED is ON The system dimly illum
84. with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view Fo
85. with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur es STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Power Steering Fluid Check The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets Chrysler Mate rial Standard MS 10838 WARNING Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or other types of power steering fluids when servicing the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to the power steering system can result from the use of the wrong power steering fluid Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized de
86. 12 General Information 00005 310 High Speed oyu ssi hag dicho he gM Ne Ges 313 Inflation Pressures 0 00 00 ee eee 312 Life of Tires 2 29 9 mee Rv REST xS 315 Load Capacity ees 306 307 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 317 en INDEX 433 Pressure Warning Light 182 Quality Grading 0000 414 Radial iisdem ehe REV sets 314 Replacement 4 0444 6 e do eg ee da 316 ROTATION nai se a tract ats ae Rc aereo win OR ADR En a R 317 Dalely ceat eaei eu ee recie e eed 71 301 SIZG5 connata sur Gah e dpa eee oe dread i 303 SPINNING fies ad Gaeta goku wea d ed 314 Tread Wear Indicators ss eco anstataii ansi 314 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 332 TOWING ER 328 24 Hour Towing Assistance 96 Behind a Motor Home 0 337 Guide opus imu Xe RIS eder RE 331 Recreational 0 00000000004 337 Weight ese zc etuer i Pes ceded bade 331 Towing Assistance 6 6 cece eee 96 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 337 Traction Control zo aces me Ee E ea WS 294 Traction Control Light 0 181 Trailer Sway Control TSC 040 299 Trailer Towing 6 0 328 Cooling System Tips 0000 337 Pitches utet scare ees entes i a 330 Minimum Requirements llle 333 Trailer and Tongue Weight 332 Trailer Towing Guide 040 331 Trai
87. 21 Ethanol uan ra EROS EUR 321 Filler Cap Gas Cap gt crcericsrasesssss 325 Gasoline ssa iaa ak f ae eu REG Pa 321 GAULE va doc gina ede ed ace ge ves edens 186 Materials Added llle 323 Methanol llle 321 Octane Rating xcosssm tie een eens oe oka 321 Requirements 0 0 e ee eeues 321 387 Tank Capacity idee etre ees 387 Fuel System Caution isses 326 327 lur eq 373 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 151 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 325 327 348 Gasoline Clean Air llle 321 Gasoline Fuel 5 2 mm mm s 321 Gasoline Reformulated 321 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0000 183 Fuel oo gas Mole oe es SR EA BA ee 186 Speedometer ic sees se Give ee ee eee e 179 Tachometer spisati pran EE ER 181 Gear Ranges oskge rkenen DA ERR 283 General Information 18 24 109 320 Glass Cleaning ius erg ed ee bre eS 372 TEM 424 INDEX aaa Gross Axle Weight Rating llsssss 329 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 328 Hands Free Phone UConnect 81 Hazard Warning Flasher 340 Head Restraints seset kortissa sia e aes 117 Head Rests i3 oh sed uae terere ie 117 Headlighis 2 2iecbe adi C iw ecd estaas 129 382 Bulb Replacement 00040 382 On With Wipers x S esq es Ce etes 129 Replacing nm dea ay eoe dora e Ba a m dera 382 Heated Mirrors eii riten
88. 30906037 Folding Rear Seat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Storage Rear Seat Armrest If Equipped qn The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage armrest Armrest Storage Bin DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the Rear Seat Armrest driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator storage bin pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed Driver Memory Switches Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you are setting the
89. AINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 073305864 1 High Beam Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Light 1 Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle 2 Turn the front fog light bulb one quarter turn coun terclockwise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two Torx fasteners 81572594 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it fromthe Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL housing 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 815727fa 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL 1 Tail Stop Light Bulb 3 Back Up Light Bulb hoi 2 Tail Turn Signal Bulb ousing 4 Pull the bulb t
90. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process yo
91. ASS DOOR OPEN with graphic e HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic e HOOD GATE DOOR OPEN with graphic e HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS HOOD OPEN with graphic e WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic e COOLANT LOW with graphic UPSHIFT with graphic CHECK GAUGES AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PARK ASSIST DISABLED SERVICE SUSPENSION SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LIMIT SPEED CHECK GASCAP ESP OFF IOD FUSE OUT MEMORY 1 POSITIONS SET MEMORY 2 POSITIONS SET MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCK LED with graphic MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE TIRE LOW PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only Stereo if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Video Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Audio Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS 0 60 mph 0 100 km h if equipped with Performance Pages Braking Distance if equipp
92. Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild e Do not Bee abrasive DE ate ng cleaning matetials car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with POENA steel woo oF scourine powder winch Will clear water scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film Special Care stains and to protect your pai
93. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Removing The Subwoofer 1 Lower the left rear passenger seat 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Remove the subwoofer SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Back seat TV offers three video channels for family enter tainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de tailed operating instructions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two headsets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats 044806358 Lowering the Display Screen 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Remote Control Location 8161d54e Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 If Equipped The VES for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker Mobile Surround KMS1 9 This feature offers the ulti mate movie experience by providing surroun
94. EATED SEAT PORK QUIE AIR OUTLET HGH C DEFROST AND 10WFR AR OUTI FT D amp VENTILATING FAN SLIDING DOOR TRUM DECK AIRCONDIONNG CHILD SEAT ANCHOR L L f SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY amp oe EOR RELEASE HANDLE HILDREN LATCH DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIENE TOP DOWN Tor ur o MASANE We voce RECOGNITION BUTTON IY VCONNECI BUTTON m SEE OWNERS MANUAL 180 FLECINONIC SIAR IY ELECTRONIC BRAKE SPEED CONTROL ar ES 2 D AWD O ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORE RRAKF TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 010505550 en INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 5 This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the au windshield This number also appears on the Automobile VIN Location Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN label your vehicle Save this label for a
95. ENT PANEL 263 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Temperature Control The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger This is accomplished by a dual sun sensor in the top of the instrument panel and an infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit There are also various sensors monitored by this system which take account for vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air flow temperature the airflow volum
96. G YOUR VEHICLE M General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM This Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visible signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeat edly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the Remote
97. GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale en STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the
98. ICLE M NOTE e Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights e A front fog light is a lighting device that provides illumination forward of the vehicle under conditions of fog rain snow or dust The front fog lights supple ment the lower beam of a standard headlight system e Proper aim and adjustment of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show proper operation of the left and right turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunction lever partially up or down Turn Signal Control Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multifunction lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times and automatically turn off es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 High Beam Switch Flash to Pass Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch You can signal another vehicle by lightly pulling the the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever multifunction lever toward the steering wheel This will towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam cause the high beam headlights to turn on and remain on until the lever is released Headlight Time Delay EN This feature delays turning off the headlights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight d
99. ION Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze protection If a non HOAT engine coolant anti freeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Use only the manufacturer s recommended coolant Re coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not section for the correct fluid type be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that a
100. If To Place An RKE Transmitter In The Vehicle Equipped isse o n 22 For Safekeeping Vehicles Equipped With Using The Panic Alarm 22 A cto at ires a ie 90 Programming Additional RKE Transmitters 23 Child Protection Door Lock 30 RKE Transmitter Battery Service 23 a E M General Information 0 24 BOWE WHIGOWE a dabas te Haas sok his a ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 Wind Buffeting a get es terat ERES 34 How To Use Remote Start cioe rcc irum jo M Liftgate 34 W Door Locke sreiresirisiicritiriti siis 27 a a a diesen ies ees ntfs d Mosel Doo ls oasis de once ac 57 W Occupant Restraints uuas naaa 36 NETT ERR 28 Lap Shoulder Belts 00 37 Passive Entry System If Equipped 29 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 38 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 Child Restraints come em ete 58 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 42 Ml Engine Break In Recommendations 69 Energy Management Feature 43 Safety lips 69 I Seat Belt Pretensioners 44 Exha st Gas sedem vale Roe cans 69 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The BeltAlert lloc meds 44 Vehicle uerb RR Es 70 Seat Belts And Pregnant
101. In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat INTRODUCTION 5 belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION WATERINFUEL REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR BULB WIPER FAILURE gt N x i f 1 FUEL RCARWNDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH ENGINE OL REARWINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED t3 Up pI BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION C x GLOW PLUG POWER WINOSHIELDWIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUID ANDWASMER SRS b RIRHRG ee LFU MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP D e 7 ZO e 4 FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE Qt PASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF LIFTGATE RELEASE AND LIFTGATE OPEN ya TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT ow KEY ACTIVATE UPPER ANDLOWPR H
102. Jeep GRAND CHEROKEE SRT 8 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTIO
103. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlights HID If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself If a headlight bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge Headlights HID when the headlights are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Headlight 1 Open the hood 2 Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 073305864 1 High Beam Bulb 3 Turn Signal Bulb 2 Low Beam Bulb 384 MAINT
104. Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ood 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Drain the transfer case and refill 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 21 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LJ Change t
105. N i t o6 im 9g noe uim wie Ro cR Use 9 8 9 SURE CR Roe Sie eon i US e 6 8 C8 E Row in 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eeeeeee hh hm 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eeee ccc creer mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 ccc cece cece rere hh n nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc cece cr cece ewer hh hh hn e WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES eeeeeeeeeeeeeeehh hh hh mnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4435994599999 v 9e vy e rev Y T ades 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2 ccc ccc ccc creer e s nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ce cece cece cere cere cece hh hn 10 INDEX 4 9 hum HER IO Biase RHES irene ais o9 E904 8 tirtira AUR RU E c d a One ique teas INTRODUCTION CONTENTS MiIntroduction 0 0 ee 4 Warnings And Cautions 04 7 H Rollover Warning c0ss0 RR ri 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl How To Use This Manuadl les 5 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will
106. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside the vehicle otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the bulb is not lit during starting have it replaced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer ee
107. OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory EN STARTING AND OPERATING 323 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional
108. PRESS comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its will withdraw any slack in the belt stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down cee the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack from Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in t
109. Program Type dk o lh No program type or un dii None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Program Type m Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Program Type 16 m Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the Tune Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes Press the Tune Scroll control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM
110. RTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 81c0f01e 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbags to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the driver and front and rear passengers sitting next to a window They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 022606177 Window Airbag Location 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior WARNING Continued e Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not stack luggage or other cargo up hig
111. TE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position Recirculation This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates which indicates that the Recir culation mode is active You may use this feature separately 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate button to return to outside air Some temperature humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation mode to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust th
112. Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System in this section 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen ger airbag unle
113. VIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 s 34 PSI 24 amp 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to dis
114. Women 46 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Seat Belt Extenders ice ease tes 46 Vehilo pars taie inei saute ut Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 000 46 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided key into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Go feature for more information refer to Keyless Go If Equipped under Starting Procedure in Section 5 of this manual Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Integrated Ignition Key The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE tran
115. Y or NO N appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Passive Entry When ON is selected the Passive Entry System allows you to unlock the vehicle s door s and trunk without using the RKE transmitter unlock button or the unlock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Display Units of Meas
116. YES Y or NO N appears Flash Lamps with Lock When YES Y is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Automatic High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Refer to Lights SmartBeams If Equipped in Section 3 of this manual for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When YES Y is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES
117. a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer C
118. a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism
119. ack in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata Artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressin
120. adio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The me
121. age to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Cooling System rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accum
122. air Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 4 Replace the spark plugs M Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary LJ Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or Schedule 126 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Replace the engine air
123. airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will detect roll overs not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light for 2 5 to 8 seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the infla
124. al should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393 e Change your engine
125. aler WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the indicates only that the parking brake is applied It does transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to not indicate the degree of brake application move the selector out of PARK WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the ge
126. all to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start usin
127. ammable Electronic Features 200 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 19 Radial Ply Tires 0 ccc eee eee 314 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 364 Radio Operation llle 263 Radio Satellite lesen 251 258 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 138 Rear Camera cosa d ate UE as Ge eae we S 149 Rear Cupholder 4245 aer es Bi nag ues 164 Rear Heated Seats 00 0 eee eae 119 Rear Park Sense System 0000 145 Rear Seat Folding lesen 121 Rear Window Defroster 000005 170 Rear Window Features 0 0000s 169 Rear Wiper Washer 0000000 e eee 169 Reclining Front Seats 0000005 115 Recorder Event Data 000000048 56 Recreational Towing o eer esses arias Ei maas 337 Reformulated Gasoline n on nananana aaa 321 Refrigeratnt 2 serere a wants abe RR ge d 356 Reminder Lights On 00040 133 Reminder Seat Belt 000 0000 ee 44 Remote Control Starting System 1 eee 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 261 Remote Starting System 005 25 Replacement Bulbs a r itari caia asgi a 381 10 430 INDEX ae Replacement Keys 0 00000 cee 16 Replacement Parts eese 351 Replacement Tires 2 0 0 2 0 00020 00 005s 316 Reporting Safety Def
128. an kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the Fuel Filler Cap driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION WARNING e Damage to the fuel system or emission control e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near system could result from using an improper fuel the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu tank filled rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and
129. ansmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Refer to Section 4 of this manual Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can ret
130. ar selector lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing Continued en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 WARNING Continued e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is oc
131. arm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and the ignition state changes to ACCES SORY ACC Regardless if the ignition state changes to ACCESSORY ACC or OFF the engine is shut off Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fir
132. art is physically held against the RKE transmitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron ics A blank transmitter is one that has never been programmed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys you can program new transmitters to the system by
133. asive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care amp Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with
134. ated gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to Fuses in Section 7 of this manual See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to one quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested
135. ation Soft Soft 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between switch to different audio languages if supported on the following items the disc if equipped NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if select an entry and make changes equipped e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between These selections can only be made while playing a b Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by LW pushing the SELECT button if equipped e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options ICE will display the following e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch equipped subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change
136. ation purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name Dial by Saying a Number e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e A
137. ay use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel 8 or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS L lt and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle w set the Mode control to Recirculate lt with A C on and roll up the windows O Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel __ or Bi Level lt 7 gp x with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 wi
138. b again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or un defined Nene Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Program Type om Program Type ddr id College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Oldies Oldies is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Personality Persnlty station with the same selected Music Type name The Public Public Music Type function only operates when in the FM Rhythm and Blues R amp B mode Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Religious Talk Rel Talk Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset st
139. backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this WARNING system Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED mm REN REGIRER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast Leaving the iPod or any supported device any ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can coast The subscription service provider i
140. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
141. by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 4 Otherwise required by
142. ce Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing 84 UNDERST
143. ce or prevent injuries 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Latch Plate Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click E e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate to Buckle 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could st
144. chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the FLIPPER GLASS TRUNK RELEASE button two times the second press within 5 seconds of the first press to open liftgate flipper glass WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Express Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one seco
145. chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation for proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion for proper tire replacement procedures Replac ing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towin
146. cleaner filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Drain the transfer case and refill Inspect the accessory drive belt s replace if necessary COOCOO DOO M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary l Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine a
147. convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment 8 INTRODUCTION EE VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Word About Your Keys 12 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Integrated Ignition Key 13 Ignition Key Removal llus 13 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 H Sentry Key Immobilizer System 15 Replacement Keys ety aereas ba a 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information lille 18 E Vehicle Security Alarm System 18 Rearming The System 0 0 18 To Set The Alarm ius bs Sed a ease et 18 To Disarm The System less 19 Mi Wiuminated Entry cose e 19 Bl Remote Keyless Entry eese 19 To Unlock The Doors liess 20 To Lock The Doors 000040 21 To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Express Down Window Feature
148. croll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time
149. curring dize he usera safety or the safely of oihers during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles EE STARTING AND OPERATING 297 ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indi cator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelera tion ease up on the accelerat
150. curring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal 202 STARTING AND OPERATING M the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop WARNING Continued The pump motor makes a low humming noise during e The ABS cannot prevent accidents including operation which is normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or tele phones Continued en STARTING AND OPERATING 293 NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing e Engin
151. d continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light E This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A continuous chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Iraction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should de
152. d as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lamps with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Headlamp Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
153. d be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Jeep SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS TM Chrysler LLC Rh 81 326 0953 First Edition Printed in U S A
154. d by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to we control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When you press the VR hard key you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR hard key listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR hard key while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the
155. d sound uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle The KMS1 Video Surround mode activates whenever a video source is selected unless the system is already in Audio Surround mode DSS modes for video sources are Stereo Audio Surround and Video Surround When in Video Surround mode balance and fade are set automatically by the KMS1 system to provide the ultimate surround sound experience es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE mm CD Etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch wi
156. d to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard P195 70R14 T125 70D15 wee3 200kPa 29PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Cj 420kPa 60PSI 4 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing
157. d when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle simply press and release the START STOP button If the START STOP button is not present insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e For the vehicle not equipped with Keyless Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For the vehicle not equipped with Keyless Go feature the message Insert Key Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you turn the key to On Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For the vehicle equipped with Keyless Go feature the message Push Button Insert Key will display in
158. d with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only require
159. d you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to 300 STARTING AND OPERATING attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off mode WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway ESP BAS Warning Lamp and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is ESP combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indica tor Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running tinuously with the engine running a malfunc tion has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on con e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously STARTING AND OPERATING 301 e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
160. ded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate tions and driving conditions influence the chance of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an evasive driving maneuvers ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift oc
161. ded that these features be played To reset all resettable functions press and release used in a controlled environment and within the the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func measured by the performance pages must never be tion Reset ALL will display during this three second exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which window can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 The Performance Pages include the following features e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force To access press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds e The
162. dio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones nmm Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control kno
163. dios only with UConnect For sales code RER REN and REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e Ifthe radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable If th
164. disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Spaa 312 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 24 2205 16 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios P
165. dium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names wn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension mH e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio
166. e llle 413 Memory Feature Memory Seat 123 Memory Seat sees 123 Memory Seats and Radio 0 123 Methanol sedora GREGOR GS 321 Mini Trip Computer 0 0 00 s ai 192 MITTOIS i raina ea Sst hae Oe ae a 78 Automatic Dimming sells 78 Electric Powered 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 79 Electric Remote 0 00 nis 79 Exterior Folding ux us teme ais ere s 79 Heated i ier aee x EP Bae eek eee des 80 Outside cuncto TREE DESDE ae an E 79 Vanity iis ecu a ge be d eor we dh a pis 80 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 317 Mopar PariS iscas a mek masdan ake e deae 351 412 MIBE EIBE va drenere te ir e P ea 321 Multi Function Control Lever 128 New Vehicle Break In Period Ls 69 Occupant Restraints o oo aao Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer 428 INDEX MM TAP MR CET 184 Oil Engine usce dies sos Sane ORO R e ae iR HOS 352 Capacity 2ieae uoga ajot es bee ena 387 Change Interval sice err do e ons 352 CHECKING settene cope tere pe Re e densos 352 Disposal s stagite sas mourned E Ree eas nol 354 Fior 2 ind hte nee ee Ee T s dri avt 354 Filtet Disposal 4 22 RR 354 Materials Added to secs escsnsi aranais mas 354 Pressure Warning Light 181 Recommendation sess 353 387 VISCOSILY setce peoa etes py ako ris ee oh wor 387 Onboard
167. e es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to pl
168. e to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR hard key to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR hard key to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup 3 To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind tha
169. e and Fade Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob and BASS will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones mm Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the Tune Scroll control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary Tune Scroll control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types
170. e and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO and not the actual air temperature Turn the mode control on the right knob to AUTO and then turn the blower control on the left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF O position on the blower control knob stops the system completely NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation How ever if the driver and or passenger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or
171. e causing serious personal injury Continued it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor with your right foot and then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the f
172. e pR Rena 385 Headlights On With Wipers 129 omartBe ms oka ks ad aw cade Rn Eaha 130 High Beam Indicator 04 179 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 182 Illuminated Entry acs seem Rae dod nurs 19 Traction Control 00040 181 300 Instrument Cluster sess 129 132 T m Sig al 4 4 eR 128 134 384 385 Interior saa ha be sanmi ta de Y 132 136 Vanity Marron ss i u doe ba nea obe eaae ea 80 Lights On Reminder 4 133 Voltage eese vd tahoe ede ae E ATE a 186 Low Puel cg eu dons ee dun exa x Hes 187 LoadHloor Cargo ee 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 180 Loading Vehicle Map Reading 02 000 cee eae 136 Tires beca Gin esie fo Bike es 306 Oil Pressure wos ed go OR m eem aos 18 Locks omae eU RR CERES d 27 PASSING auos epp hee eg PR tius 135 Automatic Door 0 eee 28 en INDEX 427 Child Protection llle 30 DOOR gee sp odd Aa 4k REGE RR aes 27 Power DOOR 4 244 4 404 5844 0h eee GRE 28 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH decet d teneri ane ed whee es 63 64 Lubrication Body s xe e sabens enes 357 Lumbar Support remek rsg teama RR Renee 116 Maintenance Free Battery 05 355 Maintenance Procedures l l 351 Maintenance Schedule 392 Maintenance Schedules llis 392 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 180 349 Manual Servic
173. e iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Artist track title album etc information on the radio display 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod9 mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous tr
174. e numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rat
175. e temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during the summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL N and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it m
176. e the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
177. eats and use seat belts Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or colli sion a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers in can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve Cargo Tie Down Hooks hicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Cargo Load Floor e Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility described on the label attached to the left door or One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic left door center pillar lined tray which holds a variety of items Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Cargo Load Floor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 The cargo load flo
178. ecommendations New Vehicle 69 Bulb Replacement 000 381 382 Calibration Compass 0 0000 e eee 198 Camera Reat ee recrey iere nen ee eee 149 Capacities Fluid iie b Rer De ee aes 387 Caps Filler T ro 325 Power Steering ies mee parca Ro vee 4 289 Radiator Coolant Pressure 364 Car Washes s vec Lace ex res eae ad 369 Carbon Monoxide Warning 69 324 Cargo Area Covet ocn eg be hd ke ER Reds 165 Cargo Area Features llle 164 Cargo Compartment 000000 164 IGN PTT 164 Cargo Light 4 55 3 band he Ebro PERE 164 Cargo Load Floor 1 0 6 0 0c 168 Cargo Tie Downs s iia ua naa 000 cece eens 167 Cellular Phone 0 0 00 cee eae 81 263 Center High Mounted Stop Light 386 Chart Tire Sizing scese sreco n 303 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 420 INDEX aaa Checks Safety sies mee ees 70 71 Child Restraint 000 58 59 64 66 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 63 64 Child Safety Locks 2i ks nte Rn 30 Clean Air Gasoline sese ree pret eee 321 Climate Control sra rasene muet rr Re eben 263 Clock ich sara tee wn gts edges 208 223 226 236 Cold Weather Operation lessen 278 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 262 COMPASS xe sered race aca dasa Pedo 198 Compass Calibration 040 198 Compass Variance amp i i s ekea c e be s 199 Computer Trip Tra
179. ection To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is term
180. ects 004 412 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 58 Restraints Occupant 3 ues kae baled tats 36 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 165 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 285 Roll Over Warning i e eR ha Rees 4 Rotation Tires 3 wk Rep ERR RE E 317 Rut Flat Feature sebere aratia d ipaa adas 310 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 70 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 71 Safety Defects Reporting 4 412 Safety Information Tire 040 301 Dalety VIPS ciscus orte a ekg ep ab qoe 69 Satellite Radio os ids punc E 251 258 Satellite Radio Antenna 000 253 Schedule Maintenance llle 392 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 70 Seat Belt Reminder eese 44 Seat Belts 2 4 054 024 dese Pedo bes be deb x deed 37 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women 0000 46 Child Restraint 000048 58 66 Extender a 23b RIS Gd 4 ef4qg acne 46 Front Seat 22a deo RR RR RR RR 37 Inspection iex eR Rea ex ere Er s 70 Maintenance llle 70 372 Pretensioners llle 44 Reminder creg 62v aad ke x pb SEG 185 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 4 42 Seats ia Sees ebb ea Se V ERG eka e Rd s 114 Adjustment sarge steet raie eee 114 Cleaning async ag satsinsgrnin DS p de eau 370 371 Rasy Entry erra anaa oe Seay me aUe ew een 127 Head Restrai
181. ed with Performance Pages 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 1 8 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC 1 4 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages e Instantaneous G Force if equipped with Performance Pages e Distance To Empty e Peak G Force if equipped with Performance Pages Trip 4 e SERVICE KEYLESS SYS e KEY FOB BATTERY LOW e KEY FOB NOT DETECTED e VEHICLE NOT IN PARK e IGNITION POSITION e PRESS BRAKE TO START e PUSH BUTTON OR INSERT KEY e TURN TO ON e Trip B Elapsed Time Service Distance e Engine Oil Pressure e Engine Oil Temperature e Display Units of Measure In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km
182. elay the multifunction lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC Only the headlights will illu minate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On Off or set the time interval High Beam Low Beam Select 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights below the instrument panel an overhead console light which contains both driver and passenger reading lights read ing lights located above the rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door or turning the center of the multifunction control lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights Front Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on by pressing the front recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time 813ac107 Front Map Reading Lights WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the right side control lever Turn the end of the control lever t
183. elow the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as de sired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignit
184. end that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The front passenger airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
185. ened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to insure that engine coolant e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre recovery bottle caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or doin Aoc dabei cias Qui T Qon amuses ad M remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine off and co
186. ents To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle Continued e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING e Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer tow ing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK Always block or
187. er Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET ra
188. ere eR me ERR 80 Heated Seats llle 118 119 High Beam Indicator sosesc erne dnine naa 179 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 135 Hitches Trailer Towing 2 60 eee eee 330 Holder Cup egre wes Meee one SE 164 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 151 Hood Release e Saleen Bea De ee we 128 TENIO us eatosteq ec eats oe meas wets a es 13 KEY ETT 12 13 Ignition Key Removal lesse 13 Illaminated EMEY esse mtt e bts 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key acasan 15 Infant Restraint 00 0 cece eee 58 59 Inflation Pressure Tires lessen 312 Information Center Vehicle issu 187 Instrument Cluster lessen 178 179 Instrument Panel and Controls 177 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 372 Integrated Power Module Fuses 379 Interior Appearance Care 0005 371 Interior FUSES 2 2 9 RR RR 373 Interior Lighting 0 000000 136 Interior Lights eese 132 136 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 138 en INDEX 425 Introd cton aude y SS Hare Be DR ae ee a 4 Inverter Power 0 000 ee 162 Jump Starting 4 22 lash o oU dea tes 341 Key Programming s sesami osema treaa taa ai me 17 Key Replacement 2 00 4 nas pss dea e dn eds 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 15 Key In Reminder 0 000 000 0080 15 Keyless Entry System 3 5 ic eerie Ee 19 Keyless
189. es in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 GI amot Dic wes Puan 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch
190. es may idle at higher speeds during warm up sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while System is functioning driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver WARNING ing parking or stopping e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially To use your brakes and accelerator more safely when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can follow these tips build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the ability and control pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by e When descending mountains or hills repeated brak gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control slow speeds Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos sible 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS A
191. es or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button
192. est the fuel system The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started if the vehicle was keyed off above 40 F 4 C outside temperature and the following vehicle start is above 40 F 4 C outside temperature It may be possible to have a message that will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures If the test is performed and the problem is gone the message will disappear If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off See your authorized dealer for service MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test y
193. estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Engine Oil Pressure Shows the current engine oil pressure The scale will read from 0 100 psi 0 689 kPa e Engine Oil Temperature Shows the current engine oil temperature The scale will read from 140 300 F 60 149 C 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Display Units of Measure In Performance Pages If Equipped WARNING To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being mance Pages is intended for off highway or off road displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT use only and should not be done on any public button once to clear the resettable function being dis roadways It is recommen
194. federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on Indicator Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly off the fuel tank after filling tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full en STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information
195. fter the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones
196. full cold respectively With the temperature setting in these posi tions the system does not attempt automatic comfort control ie Air Condi tioning Cea Recircu lation The air conditioning in this system is auto matic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing this button will tem porarily put the system in Recirculation mode This can be used when outside condi tions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation e Most of the
197. g a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the Autostick feature D to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
198. g another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode
199. g this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel
200. go and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 CAUTION Continued NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirem
201. h enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbags to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up
202. h a maintenance free battery The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection You will never have to add water nor is periodic main in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air tenance required cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or CAUTION maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the conde
203. h on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of
204. h or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The ra
205. happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper Rear Window Defroster If Equipped Press this button located on the Climate Control panel to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window de froster is ON The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 CAUTION e To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Features 177 Mi Instrument Cluster 0008 178 B Instrument Cluster Description 179 Bl Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 187 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays esse RI OUR arua 189 Trip Functions as sebrade senri eee eee 192 Performance Pages If Equipped
206. he Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mobil 19 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 0W 40 engine oil is preferred for use within the operating temperatures shown in the engine oil viscosity chart SAE 5W 40 engine oil is also allowed The proper SAE viscosity grade of engine oil should be selected based on the following recommendation and be within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil vis cosity chart ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY CHART OW 40 Preferred 20 0 10 20 32 60 80 100 29 18 12 7 0 16 27 38 Temperature range anticipated before next oil change The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Synthetic Engine Oils Yo
207. he engine oil and engine oil filter 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ood Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM M 1 M 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service r 54 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter FW Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace the engine air cleaner filter N filter I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes C E J Change the automa
208. he engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used en STARTING AND OPERATING 283 With Keyless Go If Equipped To activate the override with a valid keyfob FOBIK
209. he manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts
210. he shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use Automatic Locking mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is fully extended 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not
211. hers Windshield 136 357 Washing Vehicle 2 aces eR e RR Rn 369 Waxing and Polishing ee ecset eria essa shamia 369 Wheel and Wheel Trim 06 370 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 370 Wind Buffeting 00000020 ae 34 160 Window Fogging soccorsa teemana wa Tapaus 270 WindOWS 4 26 ERR sas 31 POWE costorda ayant oo tied easing Ane Pee d dog eges 31 Windshield Defroster lle 71 268 Windshield Washers socos socne Careen a i kai hia 136 Fluid mesnu TEE 357 een INDEX 435 Windshield Wiper Blades 357 Windshield Wipers ss erasrsse nr eieta nyni i 136 Wiper Blade Replacement n n nnna aaan 357 Wipers Intermittent 522r rre 138 Wipers Rain Sensitive annaus anas 138 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 370 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios shoul
212. hicle child restraint secure try a different seating position whenever the tether anchors behind the subwoofer are required for proper installation of a child re To attach a child restraint tether strap P straining device In the event of an accident or under Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the severe vehicle maneuvers leaving the subwoofer hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat unsecured in the vehicle could result in serious or For the outboard seating positions route the tether over fatal injury to anyone in the vehicle the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Tether Strap Mounting WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive mode
213. his section NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Instru ment Panel and Interior Lights for setting the instru ment panel lights to full daytime intensity SmartBeams If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light ing at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is re placed the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Select Auto Headlamp Low High Beams Low High Beam Refer to EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual 2 Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To Deactivate 1 Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually deactivate the system normal operation of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the sy
214. his vehicle is equipped with run flat tires Although the tires are designed with a run flat feature that allows the vehicle to be driven about 50 miles 80 km at 55 mph 88 km h immediate service should be obtained WARNING Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h if the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced You could have an accident and be severely or fatally injured NOTE The run flat feature eliminates the need for a spare tire or jack This vehicle is not equipped with either a spare tire or jack Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
215. horized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 2 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Replace the engine air cleaner filter Q Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary LJ Drain the transfer case and refill J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary d Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system ooo Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Rep
216. horized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton amp with the corresponding number 1 6 where the 7 CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the r
217. i re mnn 260 ll Remote Sound System Controls Automatic Temperature Control 263 It Equipped waas esee hes Ree EE 261 Operating TIPS ikke cere Wak eae eo 270 Radio Operation 0006 261 Operating Tips Chart 272 CD Player de ER Re ee e 262 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES B1c03f57 1 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bin 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN B qus E 245 m C m i 5 6 6 81c433bc INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light The Brake Warning Light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and stay on briefly as a bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting have the bulb re paired promptly If the light stays on longer it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released BRAKE O If the light remains on when the parking brake is off it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or low fluid level In this case the Brake Warning Light will remain on until the cause is corrected If a brake malfunction i
218. icle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed POWER OUTLETS Front Power Outlet To the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel is an outlet for electric powered accessories Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access the outlet Rear Power Outlet If Equipped The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left rear cargo area es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may
219. inated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is us
220. inates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow Yes Half Second 2nd LED 51 in 130 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Yes Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel Rear Park Assist Switch When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual When the shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a si
221. ined on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other objects Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s and Front Passenger Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with a outside automatic dimming mirrors they will operate when the inside automatic dimming mirror is on The outside mirrors operate off the inside mirror switch and will automati cally adjust for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror does Power Outside Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position iom Power Mirror Switch Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the
222. ing e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE b
223. ing process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Secur
224. ion 0 0 286 General Information 0 287 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME li Power Steering cde Yr RSS 288 W Tire Safety Information 301 Power Steering Fluid Check 289 Tire Markings deis une Ae hie ee sae 301 WM Parking Brake 0 0 0 eee 289 Tire Identification Number TIN 305 H Anti Lock Brake System 4 291 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 306 Wi Electronic Brake Control System 294 W Tires General Information 310 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 294 Run Flat Tires oo 26 eee eee an 310 TCS Traction Control System 294 Tire Pressure 22 ek re ei es 310 BAS Brake Assist System 295 Tire Inflation Pressures 312 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 296 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 313 ESP Electronic Stability Program 297 Radial Ply Des cerceii Ree en 314 TSC Trailer Sway Control 299 Tire Spinning 6 0 2 0 0 e ae 314 ESP BAS Warning Lamp And ESP TCS Tread Wear Indicators 314 Indicator Light esce 2a Be bs 300 Life Of Tire 315 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275
225. ion OFF 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The pedals can be adjusted while driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in n engaged Electronic pe n I me REVERSE R or when the Electronic Speed Control is ns operauons al Speeds greder uian HOD ON A message will be displayed in the Electronic mn Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked side of the steering wheel out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for more information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control System on when not in use
226. ion may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Interior Fuses The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to the left of the steering column Fuse Panel 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cav Cartridge yi Fuge Description Caws Cartridge wini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse T 30 Amp Audio Amp B 10 10 Amp Final Drive Control Green Red Module FDCM 2 15 Amp Sunroof B Heater Ventilation Blue Air Conditioning HVAC Rear Heated 3 E rad Htd Mirror EBL Seat Switch O H e ui Heater Ventilation 4 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Air Conditioning Yellow HVAC Relay Rear 5 10Amp Rr HVAC R O Park Assist Red Commander Only 11 Spare B E Eee Eo ce o o 6 Spare B 12 10 Amp Door Mods O H 7 20 Amp Door Locks B Red Lamps IP Courtesy Yellow Lamps Glove Box 8 Spare B Lamp B
227. ion other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperature will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position 817dd45b 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO the automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem perature Defrost Qv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically selected It must be manually selected when desired Defrost Floor Ge Air flows th
228. ir sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and t
229. ir cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ood Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Drain the transfer case and refill J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability
230. is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 MPEG Sampling i Specification Frequency KHz pit Rate kopa 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Alae 199 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 ide d 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Specification Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non mul
231. ith REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridg
232. ity It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate
233. ive cable from the battery 27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of Blue IOD 1 service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Yellow IOD 2 in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Light 6 cece 194 Grab Handle Light L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lights VT4976 Rear Cargo Light 00 214 2 Visor Vanity Light 0 V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lights 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Light 74 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lig tss occ eat aa AE Satna 3157K Front Fog Lights sosire sereniarnebd sanis 9145 Front Park Tum Light 3157A Front Side Marker llle sess W5W Headlights Low Beam 9006 Headlights High Beam 9005 Rear Turn Stop Tail Lights 3157K NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual 382
234. k Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Es
235. ke an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 WARNING Continued e During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirti
236. l change between Trip Functions Personal Settings and System Sta tus FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function YES Y or NO N SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip V Functions Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features and System Status Mes sages COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release the COMPASS A TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e TURN SIGNAL ON e PERFORM SERVICE e DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI CATE e KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PRO GRAMMED UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PRO GRAM LIMIT PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED SERVICE SECURITY KEY m DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic X DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e HOOD OPEN with graphic e HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic e HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic e LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic e HOOD GL
237. l conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation EN STARTING AND OPERATING 299 ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the ESP Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the ESP Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momen tarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion TSC Trailer Sway Control TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the Sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Section 5 of this manual for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced an
238. law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child
239. layed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARK Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should apply the park brake shift the transmission into PARK and remove the key from the ignition Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave children unattended inside a vehicle REVERSE Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can roll freely Do not shift into the NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads DRIVE Shift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditi
240. laylist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the Tune Scroll control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the Tune Scroll control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File mm Name and Fold
241. ld the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine co
242. ler Weight osx keane ee ariens RR Ree 331 TratismissiO a e deed cedex eh ew ae ee S 367 Automalie daos aha aS ded ws Bae GO 283 367 Shif hng 66 0 da i ei ea bag dam abd ous 281 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 004 23 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 151 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE Tread Wear Indicators 434 INDEX EE Turn Signals reete 134 179 384 385 UCIConrne ctoE iue nme RETIRER 246 UConnect Hands Free Phone 81 Underhood Fuses llle 376 379 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 414 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 246 Universal Transmitter leeren 151 Unleaded Gasoline illie 321 Upholstery Care ce sod eme Ee 371 Vanity Mirrors s s 220642 hg Poh eee PES 80 Variance Compass 6 0 eee 199 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading 0 6 6c eee eee 307 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage i se n nnn 271 380 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 205 259 Viscosity Engine Oil 6 2 ee eee 353 Voice Recognition System VR 109 Warning Flasher Hazard 4 340 Warning Roll OVER x erimas dpa we pes 4 Warnings and Cautions eesse d ieaie daa aes 7 Warranty Information ssa ceened et tpa i em 412 Was
243. liner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it need airbag protection will not activate the system This takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure does not mean something is wrong with the airbag you if you are not belted and seated properly or if system items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The win dow bag is only about 3 in 8 cm thick when it is inflated If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags any or irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues all of the following may occur see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra f tions for cleaning sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those airbags have deployed If you are involved in another y
244. ll Seek down for the next listenable station 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUM
245. llows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The cap must be fully tight
246. loor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL _ Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System into any forward gear when the engine is above This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out idle speed of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot pressed This system is active only while the ignition is firmly on the brake pedal switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if t
247. low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents the Washer Fluid Low message will be displayed Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear
248. mbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNI TION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the pho
249. mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable
250. molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 304 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associate
251. n llus 159 Rear Storage Compartment 165 EN Wind Bufte ng xiucenc eere er aui nss 160 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Sunroof Maintenance lisse 160 PORUM pe whet Mioluepisierdon dan dis Ignition Off Operation sss 160 ES eer eed ea sch fia safe Ree ant Sunroof Fully Closed 00 0 cece ee 160 0080 Det MOO iuis hg pqniu di 109 H Power Outlets 0 cece ee eee 160 me eet Windy Peat sees a ets 163 Front Power Outlet scg zik nee 160 SET e a NECROSS n Rear Power Outlet If Equipped 160 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 170 Bl Power Inverter If Equipped 162 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated x Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 817892c4 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obta
252. n daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zon
253. n if equipped Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats the seats Rear Heated Seat Switches closest to the doors are heated The controls for these Press the switch once to select the High setting seats are located on the rear of the center console ay Press the switch a second time to select the Low setting Press the switch a third time to turn the heating elements Off 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING When the High setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin High temperature level If the High setting is selected because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes the system will automatically switch to Low after 30 min spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex utes of continuous operation At that time the number of haustion or other physical condition must exercise illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating care when using the seat heater It may cause burns the change The Low setting will turn Off automatically even at Low temperatures especially if used for after 30 minutes long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid heated seat surfaces coming in contact and
254. n the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an aut
255. nd utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PN TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Enter
256. nd and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 e You may need to be less than 67 ft 20 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises emitted by the system Programming Additional RKE Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details RKE Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1
257. ndi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 30 seconds e The time and speed will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force longitudinal and lateral along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G force values two longitudinal and two lateral e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values Keyless Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition states the Keyless Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition state 041005979 Keyless Go Display 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition state If desired the ignition state graphic can be set to be c
258. ndicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined
259. nebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make
260. ng oriented horizontal and readable Gently insert the but ton into the receptacle by pressing on the center of the button If the button slips in easily it has been installed correctly Press firmly on the center of the button to seat the button into the receptacle The ENGINE START STOP button should only be re moved or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position Keyless Go Functions With Driver s Foot Off The Brake Pedal In PARK Position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once ACC position to activate the radio wipers and windows e Press the ENGINE START STOP button twice ON position to start the engine e Press the ENGINE START STOP button three times OFF position to turn off the ignition switch Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal 278 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL From any ignition state press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a w
261. ng out the battery vent battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 61L 347 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 348 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 348 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs cuero eb ee remedy 349 lI Replacement Parts o cess xr en 351 l Dealer Service sexa oa bak aed 351 Bi Maintenance Procedures 351 Engine Qil amp xexuteam andere iced PAR ne dea 352 Engine Oil Filter iiam esee emn 354 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 354 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication 0 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System sererersi eh 358 Cooling System 1 0 000000 361 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System see m eevee cee aes 366
262. ng up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Turning the Rear Camera On or Off 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system set up soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera system should only be used as a parking aid The Rear Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Sys tem to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look fre quently over his her shoulder when using the Rear Camera System NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink
263. ngle chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The Rear Park Assist System When the Rear Park Assist System is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Vehicles with a MyGiG radio may be equipped with a rearview camera located on the rear liftgate that allows you to see an on screen image on the navigation radio screen of the rear of your vehicle whenever the vehicle is put into REVERSE WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Camera System Always check care fully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backi
264. ns This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 8167d4ce Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 8167d4e0 Liftgate Glass Release To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open NOTE If a power malfunction to the power liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the liftgate trim panel 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M
265. ns surface a second time to SRI TE Th f thi is f i nott restore the interior lights to normal operation NO xw o dar qua m t c Ma secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or Rear Storage Compartment protect passengers from loose cargo The rear storage compartment is located on the driver s To cover tke camo atea 3 side behind the second row seat 8 1 Grasp the cover at the center handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover Rear Storage Compartment 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in WARNING place In an accident a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Rear Cargo Cover mEE X w UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used WARNING to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in s
266. nser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information Continued WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges
267. nt finish Take carenever e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive to scratch the paint near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing 8 month that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabr
268. nti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with TSC Trailer Sway Control ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is
269. ntry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or
270. nts llle 117 en INDEX 431 Heated osc ute a pee un RAE Se 118 119 Lumbar Support sess sosirea ta iiie a 116 MEMOLY aa d soto sted odes eed e TEE e 123 POWeP lzadguekegeedonsderd pe Perd ores 116 117 Rear Folding eee reas a Rorate 121 Reclining i2 44 SX euin enc 115 Security Against Theft 0 0 18 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 181 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 362 Selection of Oll 2 0 eee esee ee 353 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming llle 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance scris lle eee eee 409 Service Contract 0 0 00 000000000 411 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 00 180 Service Manuals leeren 413 Setting the Clock 04 208 223 226 236 settings Personal soste ssa sa eee emen 200 Shift Lock Manual Override 282 spud C ET 281 Automatic Transmission 281 Shoulder Belts llle 37 Signals Turn erem ees 134 179 384 385 Sirius Backseat TV 2 ee eee 258 SmartBeams 2er 130 Sound System Kicker uc ea etae reae ed estes 256 Speed Control Cruise Control 142 Speedometer jc bind s pu bee RE A Ee 179 Starting e cessi ie em awe eee ee 25 276 Automatic Transmission 276 Cold Weather 1 2 0 0 0000 eee 278 Engine Fails to Start
271. nu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect lan guage selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Auto Door Locks When YES Y is selected all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Auto Unlock On Exit When YES Y is selected all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES
272. o remove it from the socket 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the light assembly CHMSL 073305865 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 21 Gallons 79 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 6 1 Liter Engine SAE 0W 40 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 6 1 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 14 8 Quarts 14 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 6 1L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API categories of SM or SM CF and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 The manu facturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil such as Mobil 1 SAE 0W 40 or equivalent Oil Filter 6 1L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs PLZTR5A 13 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selecti
273. o select Low High or one of the five speed sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds Refer to Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System in this es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 section For information on the rear wiper and washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section Windshield Wiper Washer Switch NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that pre vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Pull down and release the control lever f
274. ocated on the switch bank just above the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an sss ssss emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 the fan control to high This allows the heater
275. ode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 245 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 245 ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped eges eee eeu roe eec re e rac 246 Connecting The iPod 247 Using This Feature 04 247 Controlling The iPod Using Radio D ttons ise XV Shade a 248 Play Mode i204 9RUARR Rx RR PR 3 248 List Or Browse Mode 249 H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios Only 251 System Activation 6 0 6 0 eee eee 252 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting Satellite Mode Satellite Antenna Reception Quality Operating Instructions Satellite Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped ll Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If Equipped W Sirius Backseat TV If Equipped 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M H Video Entertainment System Sales Code E CD DVD Maintenance vss e e 262 NI A MEE er ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 263 icker i e E Pon Senet ar W Climate Controls e iron rere 263 Equipped
276. of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low the preceding safety tips The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible dam
277. olant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install only the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mile age and increased emissions Brake System Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the brake system warning light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake
278. on 6 1L Engine Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR NV146 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent Usage of other fluid lubricants is NOT recommended Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steer ing Fluid P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 392 Required Maintenance Intervals E Maintenance Schedules 392 7 2 Tun 1 Eoi Ee E717 mMo2Zzr2zamazZz rz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manu
279. ons For additional shifting information refer to Autostick later in this section EN STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Rocking the Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result AUTOSTICK Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide the driver with more control Autostick allows the driver to in crease engine b
280. onstantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition state is changed the display always re appears Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction T the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
281. or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped wit
282. or a single wiping cycle Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maxi mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 1 2 second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
283. or and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or grave
284. or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For larg
285. or is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure NOTE The cargo load floor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Hip up pull loop s so they are perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in tray 3 Lift tray over loop s and reposition tray 4 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 5 Push loop s back down so they are parallel to the top of the tray REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this
286. oth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an e
287. ou might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and seat belt retractor assem e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as particles The particles are a normal by product of the possible process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Enhanced Accident Response Feature Maintaining Your Airbag System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically The hazard lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine In addition after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain lit until the ignition switch is turned off e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail
288. our vehicle may fail the test 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then i
289. ow to stop E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto Up it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for one second Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lockout button To enable the window controls ress the window lockout button again Window Lockout Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positio
290. panol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approve
291. performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new integrated key is programmed The RKE trans mitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grated key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
292. play pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 PSI 34 34 81971362 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios STARTING AND OPERATING 319 320 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may no
293. poten tial seat overheating always ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position amber lights indicate High Low Off before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position if equipped NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 1 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle to release M Rear Seat Release 030906036 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Do not fold the rear seat down with the center To Raise Rear Seat seat belt buckled Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interfer ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position 2 Fold the rear seat completely forward should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 0
294. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds main
295. r optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found whe
296. raking ability control upshift and down shift points and enhance the driving experience This system can also provide the driver with more control during passing city driving mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations 286 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position the lever can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to engage the AutoStick mode Moving the shift lever to the right or the left will engage the Autostick mode In normal driving mode Boxed D displayed in the PRNDL moving the shift lever to the right will engage the Autostick mode putting the transmission in the currently engaged gear Moving the shift lever to the Left will engage the Autostick mode and downshift the transmission 1 gear For example the transmission is in Normal Mode and is currently operating in 3rd gear a boxed D is displayed in the PRNDL a push to the right will engage the Autostick mode in 3rd and a Boxed 3 will be displayed in the PRNDL A push to the left will engage Autostick mode and downshift to 2nd gear and a Boxed 2 will be displayed in the PRNDL Once Autostick mode is engaged a move to the right or left will trigger a upshift or trigger a downshift NOTE In the Autostick mode the transmission will shift up and down when left or right D D is manu ally selected by the driver The transmission will not
297. ransmission shift lever selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 20 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced perfor mance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 22 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows the front fog lights are ON 23 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 as a bulb
298. rately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recom mended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in sec tion 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the 70 THINGS TO K
299. re the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycl
300. reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the ESP Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stabil ity Program in this section for more information BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction affor
301. rike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your ab domen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button marked
302. roof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction is detected the sunroof will automatically re tract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing the sunroof press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your veh
303. rough the front and rear floor outlets Y amp f and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Bi Level Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning on and off during manual operation only Condi tioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NO
304. s If Equipped 118 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 Automatic Headlight System Interior Lights 000 136 If Equipped 0 0008 129 Front Map Reading Lights 136 SNe o eaten Gate te m ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 136 ipud d MR M 1 EE E 138 wa on SA uuu 131 Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System 138 Instrument Panel And Interior Lights 132 BeUNSERIME WIPES c DCEQUIPDSGL siti dig Pun Battery Saver Feature llle 132 Wit Teleseaping oes GOLUBIU ApR inpet H9 Hen Reniniduf lt e2oocaeseneeonees 133 ll Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 141 Fog Lights If Equipped 133 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 142 Turn Signals ccce 134 To Actiyate 4 39 y cube 4 8 Each emos Cen 143 High Beam Switch c vscsseeevases 135 To Set At A Desired Speed 143 Flash To Pass eee eee ee ee 135 To Deactivate cs wane edn KE das 143 Headlight Time Delay eese 135 To Resume Speed 00045 143 To Vary The Speed Setting 143 To Accelerate For Passing 144 Wi Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 145 Rear Park Assist Sensors
305. s Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following Failure to perform the required maintenance items pages for the required maintenance intervals may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 395 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 3906 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24
306. s mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the RKE transmitter The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 81bb182d Three Button FOBIK FOB with Integrated Key NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
307. s Sirius Satellite alter the operation or damage the device Follow Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music the device manufacturer s guidelines sports news entertainment and programming for chil e Placing items on the iPod or connections to the dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors Failure to following this warning could result in an accident NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access W
308. s indicated immediate repair is necessary and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is dangerous UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 3 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 High Beam Indicator E Indicates that headlights are on high beam 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 5 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of t an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or se
309. s it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME bu
310. smitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni tion Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera tion Therefore only RKE transmitters that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e TheSentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit ters or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional p
311. soline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e
312. sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Tire Markings 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 302 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter
313. ss the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED The removable subwoofer is located in the rear cargo area and is fastened in place using the child restraint anchors located on the left rear passenger seatback Installing The Subwoofer 1 Lower the left rear passenger seat 2 Align the left outside edge of the subwoofer with the outside edge of the inner cargo tie down hook ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 3 Slide the subwoofer toward the front of the vehicle so 4 Connect the electrical connector that the rear edge lines up with the end of the load floor 5 Fold the left rear passenger seat rearward into the upright position The rear tether anchors should engage the hooks located on the back of the subwoofer 258 UNDERSTAN
314. ss the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates The second row center position has an auto matic locking retractor Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restrain
315. ssion will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears General Information e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in 2nd gear After starting the driver should continue to manually upshift D as the vehicle is accelerated Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem
316. start the calibration The CAL indicator will be dis played in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead console This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS TEMPERATURE but ton for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until the Compass Vari ance message and the last variance zone number display in the EVIC 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to exit Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound me
317. stem NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running and the transmis sion is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK ACC or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel and Interior Lights When the multifunction lever is in the parking light headlight or AUTO position if equipped rotating the center portion of the lever up and down will increase and decrease the brightness dimmer control of the instru ment panel lights Full daytime brightness on all elec tronic displays odometer overhead console radio and Automatic Climate Control if equipped is obtained by rotating the center portion of the control to the first
318. t positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for
319. t cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 4 eb Ab eee oed KR5S120123 Canada eer Eee entre aa 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 1L Engine The 6 1L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 9 1 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfabS gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties STARTING AND OPERATING 321 necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning ga
320. t listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show i
321. t of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking even on short trips Someone on the road may bea the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out LEN poor driver and cause a collision which includes WARNING you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas Lap Shoulder Belts sengers safe too All seating positions in your vehicle have combination Continued lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to redu
322. t so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row center seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate in
323. t you have to press the VR hard key first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR hard key say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect System For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages fully WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the WARNING Continued e It
324. taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
325. tainment System VES Guide 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Multimedia system REN or Navigation RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Operating Instruc
326. termine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal
327. th A C on Adjust Temperature Q Te control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost END CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and 06 TOt Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Wi Voca COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 14 In very cold weather if if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor S jor pill Defrost Sig as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 81352266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedure 00 0 Keyless Go If Equipped Normal Starting coo sesime amie iia Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 290 oda eae cag ea If Engine Fails To Start 0 After Starting s esc vae eg un Malas ll Automatic Transmission 00 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override uu euer ane Sistas bows Sarees 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges i9 sk ee e Eg edes Red Rocking The Vehicle B AutoStick 2 0 eee 285 AutoStick Operat
328. th the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat ESP BAS belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder Sys tem BeltAlert in Section 2 for more information 17 Cruise Indicator CRUISE This indicator lights when the speed control system is turned ON 18 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 19 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic t
329. the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged Child Protection Door Lock 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M ue Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the wind
330. ther strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap First loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate
331. this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 309 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Run Flat Tires T
332. tic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing S J Drain the transfer case and refill T J Inspect the accessory drive belt s replace if necessary E D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 399 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system ood Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Aut
333. time to select the Low setting Press the switch a third time to turn the heating elements Off When the High setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High temperature level If the High setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low after 30 min utes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low setting will turn Off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at Low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid heated seat surfaces coming in contact and poten tial seat overheating ALWAYS ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position amber lights indicate High Low Off before placing any of the seats into a folded flat positio
334. tions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure Global Positioning System GPS RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day i
335. tisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone a
336. to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability 312 STARTING AND OPERATING EE of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will
337. to the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and bel
338. tor units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of signed to activate only in certain side or rollover the driver and the front passenger and position every collisions When the Occupant Restraint Control one for the best interaction with the front airbag ORC detects a collision requiring the window bags to LEN inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is sensed A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the head
339. tor turns ON The status indica switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the switch again to turn the power off inverter is producing AC power NOTE Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded E WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Inverter Switch NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CUPHOLDERS In the center console there are two cupholders for the front seat passengers Rear Cupholders CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multifunction control lever to the extreme top posi tion If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open Front Cupholders The rear passengers have access to two cupholders that pull out from the lower center of the rear seat es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off all Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped interior lamps Push on the le
340. trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer
341. tton will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Scroll control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side Tune Scroll control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Scroll control knob Press the Tune Scroll control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the Tune Scroll control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balanc
342. tural 35 20Amp Trail Tow Mod Export 44 Spare Yellow Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module Cav Cartridge Mini Fuse Description ity Fuse 9 10 Amp Trailer Tow Park Red Lamps 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps Red 12 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 4 13 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 2 14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal Yellow Integrated Power Module 19 a Bi Fog Lamps Cav Cartridge Viini Fuse Description 16 20 Amp Horn ity Fuse Yellow 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps 17 20 Amp Rear Fog Lamps Ex Red Yellow port Only 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Cave Cartridge writ Fuge Description Cav Cartridge wini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 18 20 Amp Front Control Module 29 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow FCM Batt 1 Red Controller ORC R S 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop 30 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Turn Red Controller ORC R O a a TO ue Module VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Stop 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Yellow Turn battery Y s 22 30Amp Final Drive Control Bud MA d Pink Module FDCM e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module MOD labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 i ets Decision Han e Or disconnect the negat
343. u may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 WARNING Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped wit
344. u will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect system The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section For identific
345. ug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate ru E al Ss HICDepepepbe 042305233 RES RSC Radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the On Volume control knob to turn on the radio Push the On Volume control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the On Volume control knob to the right increases the vol ume and to the left decrease
346. ulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden When working n art the fadiator cooling fan dise hose vertically down the face of the condenser connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub controlled and can start at any time the ignition ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection switch is in the ON position at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for You or others can be badly burned by hot engine leaks coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery ae bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUT
347. ure In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears System Status Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed will display all currently active System Warnings e Tire Pressure Monitor System shows the current pres sure of all four road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Section 5 of this manual TIRE 3b vm 34 PSI 37 32 d Tire Pressure Display NOTE Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tires General Information Tire Inflation Pres sures in Section 5 for additional information 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR EDESESESRESESRESERES SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO mms AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX mE JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042005200 REO Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON
348. utton and say Setup followed by Emergency e The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press nu
349. vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Do not rotate the tires as the wider rear tires will not fit on the front of the vehicle TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells 318 STARTING AND OPERATING e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will T illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center E
350. vel 0 00 192 Connector UCD cde ip ae O28 deed ee andthe 246 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 246 Console Overhead leeren 150 Contract Service leen 411 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 364 Cooling System sectes s c ex RR REX RAS 361 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 363 Coolant Capacity 1 2 2 0 6 00 eee eee 387 Coolant Level 0 00 00 0 llle 361 365 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 364 Drain Flush and Refill 362 INSPeCHON isa ke eene ARS Sea sikk aus 365 Points to Remember 0 00000 365 Presstite Cap i vacans qu e ware a ee RR aine 364 Radiator Cap sace x pre I bares 364 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 362 387 Cruise Light 2 202 i ect 4h e b een 185 Cupholdets i a fu xa at eee OPER PS 164 Customer Assistance ki trenia 409 Data Recorder Event llle 56 Daytime Running Lights 191 Dealer Service llle 351 Defroster Rear Window 170 NENNEN INDEX 421 Defroster Windshield Diagnostic System Onboard Dimmer Switch Headlight Dipsticks Power Steering Disarming Theft System Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage DVD Player Video Entertainment System Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet Electronic Brake Control System
351. vere catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to ar eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Warning Light S This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM 9 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower spee
352. wer Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to cither Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort Set mode knob to any desired Automatic Although Manual anual automatic User selectable User selectable Manual Air Temperature air delivery point Adjust Auto Lo or Hi can be control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Control Temperature knobs to select selected a manually is disabled User must recirculated the desired temperature selected airflow level adjust temperature is reccommend for knobs to obtain the the optimum comfort desired temperature Full Manual Set blower knob to any desired Manual Manual Manual automatic User s User selectable Operation airflow level other than Hi or control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Lo Auto Set mode knob to any is disabled User must recirculated desired air delivery point other adjust temperature than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to obtain the knobs to select the desired desired temperature temperature Manual Air Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any posit
353. wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 5 WARNING 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire All tires should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread can result in sudden tire failure You could lose grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth control and have an accident resulting in serious becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear injury in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragrap
354. will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Pla
355. witches ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Meu Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjust ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust ment NOTE The four way seat does not have an up down adjustment Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as Adjustable Head Restraints High as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Heated Seats If Equipped The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the heater air conditioning controls The heaters provide the same average heat level for both cushion and back After turning ON the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber LEDs on the side of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illuminated for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select the High setting Press the switch a second
356. working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Like the front airbags the preten sioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert
357. y position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mmy if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9
358. ying MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three nn e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession
359. your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts For typical installation instruc tions refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the te
360. ystem Illuminated 19 Ethanol ses ges0 gag be tahoe ese deed SPEI 321 Event Data Recorder lessen 56 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 69 324 359 Exhaust Syste oeiee ee te eee ee ee ee mes 358 Exterior Finish Care llle 369 Fabre Care 144 32 Smndc ge aper OSA Ga 370 Filters Air Cleaner asc asd 2 adi 85 44 a e eh ae es 354 Engine Oil iua decem aw aah A shack Bee ds ee 354 Engine Oil Disposal llle 354 Finish Cart ese heen ERROR IDEE EO Ran 369 Flashers temete E Gu ese CSA eae Ped 340 Hazard Wartung xs eges ek ah eer ee 340 TumiSignal 5 20 fm 179 384 385 Flipper Glass Liftgate lesse 35 Flooded Engine Starting 279 Fluid Brake 6 cerpen a 366 Fluid Capacities 2 387 Fluid Leaks i Gee een sce exa es 7 Fluid Level Checks Brake ioe eed wa DE AG gu AE GE vr vea 366 en INDEX 423 Cooling System assa 6 ee eee 361 Engine Oll sis ce ee eae e e 352 Power Steering qerer eunea paean ee eee 289 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 388 Fog light Serviee ses cust n CR th ovas 384 Fog Lights i ek certe A eus 133 186 384 Folding Rear Seat sc uer Ree RR ER etg 121 Four Way Hazard Flasher 340 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle iilis 285 Front Heated Seats nonan anaana ee eee 118 Fuel TeS sarc tree e i ua RN NERA A 321 Additives 23842244 Rasa REO es 323 Clean Aif civi cee alee od IET eee ea EN 3

2009 Jeep Grand Cherokee SRT8 Owners Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents